2016 Chrysler 200 Sedan Owner'

2016 200
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2016
16UF-126-AD
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Third Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
200
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped under the right front seat
and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure
Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle
registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ RKE Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement RKE Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer RKE Key Fob Programming . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs . . . . . .26
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .28 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .62
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . .37
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .107
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Push Button Ignition
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) the push of a button as long as the RKE Key Fob is in the
transmitter (RKE Key Fob) and a Keyless Push Button passenger compartment.
Ignition.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry Feature
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go —
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
Passive Entry feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — ON/RUN will illuminate.
Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
Vehicle⬙ for further information).
push of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side
(side opposite of the emergency key) of the RKE Key Fob
against the engine START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
RKE Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob) and an emergency key,
which stores in the rear of the RKE Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking
the glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The RKE Key Fob
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
General Information
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
CAUTION!
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the RKE Key Fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in
the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (RKE Key Fob), a Keyless Push Button Ignition, and a RF receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE Key
Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to
start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow
the engine to crank if an invalid RKE Key Fob is used to
start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the
engine off in two seconds if the engine controller does not
receive the proper authorization codes from the body
control module.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE Key Fob to
start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the RKE Key Fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programAll of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle ming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A
blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been prohave been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
grammed.
Replacement RKE Key Fobs
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer SysNOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
tem serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
authorized dealer.
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Customer RKE Key Fob Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
authorized dealer.
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the
General Information
Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following auThe following regulatory statement applies to all radio dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headfrequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
lights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Rearming Of The System
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
2. This device must accept any interference received,
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
including interference that may cause undesired oprearm itself.
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
To Disarm The System
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition is cycled to the ⬙OFF⬙ The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting the following methods:
And Operating⬙ for further information).
button on the RKE Key Fob.
• Push the UNLOCK
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
vehicle:
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
button on the interior power
• Push the LOCK
Entry” in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vedoor lock switch panel with the driver and/or
hicle⬙ for further information).
passenger door open.
• Place the ignition system out of the OFF position.
button on the exterior Passive
• Push the LOCK
Entry Door Handle with a valid RKE Key Fob NOTE:
available in the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Key- • The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button
less Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To
on the RKE Key Fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
Security Alarm.
information).
• Push the LOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the
alarm will sound.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior Tamper Alert
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Security System Manual Override
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the RKE
doors using the manual door lock.
Key Fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
Manual Door Lock Switch
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
2
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
RKE Key Fob. The RKE Key Fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE Key Fob
RKE Key Fob
buttons for all RKE Key Fob.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE
Key Fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE Key Fob. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current set1st Press Of RKE Key Fob Unlocks
ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
button on the RKE Key Fob. To change To Lock The Doors
UNLOCK
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in Push and release the LOCK
button on the RKE Key
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further Fob to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash,
information.
and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Flash Lights With Lock
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
the doors are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informacan be turned on or turned off. To change the current tion.
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Sound Horn With Lock
activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC
button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Unlatch The Trunk
NOTE:
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE Key Fob two times • The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
horn will remain on.
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” under “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa- • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
tion.
vehicle when using the RKE Key Fob to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
Using The Panic Alarm
by the system.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC
button on the RKE Key Fob for at least
one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
Emergency Key Removal
housing or the printed circuit board.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
latch on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with
the seal during removal.
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
Separating The RKE Key Fob Case
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the 2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opbattery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
eration.
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved • Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE Key
Fob may reduce this range.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
How To Use Remote Start
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote • Vehicle in PARK
Keyless Entry (RKE) (RKE Key Fob) to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • Doors closed
while still maintaining security. The system has • Hood closed
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
• Trunk closed
NOTE:
• Hazard switch off
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• RKE panic
button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle Security Alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep RKE Key Fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious injury or
death.
Remote Start Abort Messages on Your Instrument
Cluster Display
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
• Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
• Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE Key Fob. However, the
Push and release the REMOTE START
button on the
ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
doors will lock, parking lights will flash, and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Vehicle
Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
Push and release the REMOTE START
button one
NOTE:
time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15minute cycle.
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable with a one time push of the REMOTE START
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
button for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start mode.
Remote Start request.
• For security, power window and power sunroof opTo Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
in the Remote Start mode.
button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
UNLOCK
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
To Enter Remote Start Mode
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
button by the party responsible for compliance could void the
cycle, push and release the START/STOP
(vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE: The message ⬙Remote Start Active Push Start DOOR LOCKS
Button⬙ (vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
will display in the instrument cluster until you push the Manual Door Locks
button.
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
START
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
General Information
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and indicator is visible.
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the trunk.
WARNING!
Manual Door Lock Switch
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the RKE Key Fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock
switches is located on each of
the front door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or
unlock the doors and trunk.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the RKE Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Power Door Lock Switches
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
If you push the power door lock
switch while the The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any power door locks if:
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. 1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enThis prevents you from accidentally locking the RKE
abled.
Key Fob in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF
position or closing the door will allow the locks to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to 0 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
MPH (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in Doors
PARK.
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child3. The driver door is opened.
Protection Door Lock system.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
The Child-Protection Door Locks are located inside the
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
rear edge of the door.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Set1. Open the rear door.
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or similar flatfurther information.
bladed object into the lock and rotate clockwise apNOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
proximately one-quarter turn to the lock position or
in accordance with local laws.
counter clockwise to the unlock position (as indicated
by the stamped icons).
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Unlock Child Protection Door Lock
Lock Child Protection Door Lock
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
pull the toggle lock by the door handle (UNLOCKED
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower reposition), roll down the window, and open the door with
sponse time.
the outside door handle.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft
push the RKE Key Fob lock or unlock buttons.
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will toggle when the
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to door is unlocked.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “1st Press of RKE Key Fob Unlocks All Doors”
is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab
hold of the drivers door handle. To select between “ 1st
Press of RKE Key Fob Unlocks All Doors” and “1st Press
of RKE Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side — If Equipped
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5
m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will toggle when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“1st Press of RKE Key Fob
Unlocks All Doors” or “1st Press of RKE Key Fob Unlocks
Driver Door”).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
Key Fob In Vehicle
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
finds a Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside the car and it
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
does not find any Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs outside
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside your vehicle, the
the car, then the car will unlock and alert the customer.
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors a valid
is in the OFF position.
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob is detected inside the vehicle,
and no valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob is detected
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
when any of the following conditions are true:
search in any passive entry vehicle.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
knobs.
Key Fob while a door is open.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob outside the
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry
handle while a door is open.
door handle.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
the door is open.
door panel switch and then close the doors.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft (1.0
m) of the decklid, push the button located on the light bar
between the license plate lamps.
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE Key Fob in the trunk and try to close the
decklid, the decklid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs
is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
decklid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
Key Fob battery is dead.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Key Fob lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
WINDOWS
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
door windows.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Power Window Controls
1 — Window Lockout Switch
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Driver/Passenger Window Controls
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
WARNING! (Continued)
location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by
the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The Driver One Touch Down
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inswitch to the second
feature. Push the window
formation.
detent and release, and the window will go down
automatically.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
(Continued)
To open the window part way, push the window
switch to the first detent and release it when you
want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch to the second detent and release.
Push the
switch again to close the window.
The window will go down automatically.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
Manual Down
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoswitch to the first detent and
Push and hold the
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
release when you want the window to stop.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Express Down
Express Up
switch to the second detent and release. The
Lift the
window will go up automatically.
Manual Up
Lift the
switch to the first detent and release when
you want the window to stop.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
it in the DOWN position). To enable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout button
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
again (setting it in the UP position).
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
Wind Buffeting
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurdetent to open the window completely and continue rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
after the window is fully open.
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunWindow Lockout Switch
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
button (setting
push and release the window lockout
Reset Auto-Up
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK button on the RKE Key Fob twice
within five seconds or by using the external release
switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang.
The release feature will function only when the vehicle is
in the unlock condition.
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The EVIC/DID display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Trunk Release Button
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in this
section for more information on trunk operation with the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Passive Entry feature.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
2
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
properly.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
Air Bags room to inflate.
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this
section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Seat Belt Systems
between occupants and the door and occupants could Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
be injured.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact happen far away from home or on your own street.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when- and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unever the ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
position.
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
Initial Indication
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occuignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position pants to buckle their seat belts.
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
Change Of Status
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the belts are buckled again.
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
WARNING!
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
(Continued)
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt.
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
anchor point.
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch best.
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
• Occupant Classification System
system components:
Advanced Front Air Bags
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
• Air Bag Warning Light
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Steering Wheel and Column
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Instrument Panel
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And
Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Passenger
Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster / Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as Advanced Air Bag Features
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
which may receive information from the front impact
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
sensors or other system components.
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy determined by the OCS.
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, Passenger Seat
away from an inflating air bag.
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occuquantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM • The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front paschild restraint; or
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
Front Passenger Seat OcFront Passenger Air
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
cupant Status
Bag Output
for the front passenger to be seated properly and propRear-facing child restraint
Reduced-power deerly wearing the seat belt.
ployment
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Child, including a child in
Reduced-power deAdvanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the a forward-facing child reployment OR Fullinflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if straint or booster seat*
power deployment
the OCS estimates that:
Properly seated adult
Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
ployment
light objects on it; or
Reduced-power de• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas- Unoccupied seat
ployment
senger, including a child; or
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
seatback in an upright position
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects.
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult, Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. • The front passenger carries or holds an object while
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
and center console.
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instrufront passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
ment panel).
seat.
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
to face the rear of the vehicle.
passenger’s seated weight.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
2
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
(Continued)
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
in the instrument panel
The Air Bag Warning Light
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger • At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only FCA US
LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover, or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
driver and front passenger, and position the front occutogether with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Front Air Bags.
Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out“AIRBAG.”
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
Rollover Events
If A Deployment Occurs
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. or all of the following may occur:
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have detion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by bags will not be in place to protect you.
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
WARNING!
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immeprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the System serviced as well.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or NOTE:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
but they will open during air bag deployment.
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
structions for cleaning.
authorized dealer immediately.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
In the event of an impact, if the communication network Procedure
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF position. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
tem perform the following functions:
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or and starting the engine.
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
Air Bag Warning Light
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
button.
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
the battery has power.
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
• Unlock the power door locks.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
on and the air bags will not inflate.
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malremains on while driving.
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
again after initial startup.
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecThe ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncsystem immediately.
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
crash investigation.
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
WARNING!
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
vehicle or the EDR.
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
or call 1-866-732-8243.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol : 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
weight of the child restraint) for using the
combined weight of the child and the child
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
restraint?
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH anchorage system once the combined weight is
more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
forward-facing child restraint?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anlower anchors in the center position. The
chorages?
inner anchorages are 17.7 inches (450 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached using a
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
common lower LATCH anchorage?
or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower
anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
back of the front passenger seat?
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
All head restraints may be removed
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child Always follow the directions of the child restraint
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
here.
WARNING!
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
(Continued)
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
tions to attach a tether anchor.
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacmay need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
turer’s instructions.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
to allow more room for the child seat.
in any direction.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatWhen using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forthe recommended weight limit of
ward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passentouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be reYes
All head restraints may be removed?
moved.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the
seating position with an ALR reseat belt path of the child restraint?
tractor.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
more room for the child seat.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and 1 — Cover
Tether Strap Mounting
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to Transporting Pets
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
a collision.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
SAFETY TIPS
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
Vehicle
dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag
Seat Belts
Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
or remains on while driving, have an authorized
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Ocsystem.
cupant Restraints” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .122
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .133
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .122 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And
Approach Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .131
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .134
. . . . . . .139
. . . . . . .141
. . . . . . .142
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Memory Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .162
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .149
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .155
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .159
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .164
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Battery Saver Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .172
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ Windshield Washer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .174
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .176
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .177
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .186
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .187
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .193
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .198
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .199
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .202
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .214
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .216
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . .
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .210
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .221
—
. . . . . . . . . . .222
. . . . . . . . . . .222
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .247
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .229 䡵 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ Parallel Parking Space Assistance
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .230
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
▫ Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Operation/Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .245
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .246
▫ Sunglass Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .279
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .281
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .285
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 䡵 POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .289
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . .
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
—
. . . .293
. . . .295
. . . .295
. . . .295
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .295
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Opening Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . .296 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . .296
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Closing Power Shade — Express . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode . . . . . .297
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .309
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
䡵 POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .298
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .301
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear
Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Grocery Bag Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Ski Pass-Through. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
On or Off through the touchscreen.
3
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
features.
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
9-1-1 Call
• The vehicle brand.
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, 4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
additional help is needed.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
WARNING!
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a (voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Device Screen will display the following message Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
dealer.”
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global
Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or
3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.
General Information
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized user’s authority to operate the equipment.
by the subscriber.
NOTE:
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
three detent positions:
lane next to your vehicle.
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
gear selector is moved out of the PARK position.
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs.
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob or open any door. This LED
shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent to
the Front and Rear Doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will
move slightly downward from the present position when
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
then return to the original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
3
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
This feature allows for additional flexibility in positionmirror cover upward. The light will turn on automatiing the visor to block out the sun.
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE: The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
BSM Warning Light
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
3
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
Overtaking/Approaching
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system.
It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrutime, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
ment Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
muted.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode,
the system will respond with both visual and audible
alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an
audible alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating SEATS
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and vehicle.
used.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Power Seats — If Equipped
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
Power Seat Switch
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward. The
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver’s seat may be
equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch
is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push
the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease
the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
3
Power Lumbar Switch
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
Front Seat Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Seat Height Adjustment
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen. On models that are equipped with remote start, the
once to turn the HI heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
• Press the heated seat button
remote start.
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
a second time to
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
a third time to
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Head Restraints
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant’s
head and the RHR.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be adjusted to
fully remove the head restraint. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and
push downward. Then adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
Up, Mid and Down. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there is no occupant in the center seat, the
head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for
the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, the rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull on the loops to fold down either
or both seatbacks.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When returning the rear seatback to the upright position,
be sure the seatback is latched.
WARNING!
Rear Seat Release Loops
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The rear cargo area of the vehicle (with the rear
seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the proper
restraint system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles, for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of
desired radio station presets.
3
The memory switch is located on the driver’s side door
panel. The switch contains 3 buttons, a S (SET) button to
activate the memory save function, the number (1)
memory button and the number (2) memory button. The
memory switch allows the driver to recall either of the
Driver Memory Switch
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
appropriate number button on the switch.
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- NOTE:
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets).
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
switch, then push the number (1) button within five
memory profile.
seconds. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), will
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
display which memory position is being set.
Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
If desired, a second memory profile can be stored into
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
memory as follows:
Key Fob To Memory
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON position.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob can be
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer- programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror and radio station presets). memory profiles with a push of the UNLOCK button on
the RKE Key Fob.
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
switch, then push the number (2) button within five
seconds. The EVIC/DID will display which memory
position is being set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fob you 4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Fob within 10 seconds.
Uconnect system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
NOTE: Your RKE Key Fob can be unlinked to your
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inmemory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, followed
formation.
by pushing the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob
To program your RKE Key Fob, perform the following: within 10 seconds.
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC/DID.
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
MEMORY button number 1 or the UNLOCK button on
3. Push and release the SET button on the memory
the RKE Key Fob linked to memory position 1.
switch, then within five seconds push and release the
button labeled 1 or 2 accordingly. “Memory Profile To recall the memory settings for driver two, push
MEMORY button number 2 or the UNLOCK button on
Set” (1 or 2) will display in the EVIC/DID.
the RKE Key Fob linked to memory position 2.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
cancelled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
•
selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the
ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry and Easy Exit position.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Feathan or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two levers must be released.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
3
Safety Latch Lever Location
3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and
push and hold the safety latch lever to the right.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Safety Latch Lever
4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights — if equipped.
3
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
this feature.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the last detent for NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
automatic headlight operation. When the system is on, turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
place the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the information.
automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of
Headlight Time Delay
the AUTO position.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headfor up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
vehicle in an unlit area.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
Automatic Headlights Only)
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the Equipped
delay.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
turn off in the normal manner.
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
NOTE:
specific light and automatically switches from high
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this of view.
feature.
NOTE:
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Unturned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrumation.
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv- To Deactivate
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highin vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
operation of low beams).
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
ignition off.
system.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
The Daytime Running Lights come on whenever the
dealer.
engine is running, and the transmission is not in the
To Activate
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
position.
used for normal nighttime driving.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
3
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE:
Lane Change Assist
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC/ the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
DID and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
Flash-To-Pass
signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a turn You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
signal is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will released.
turn back on when the turn signal is turned off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Push the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the button a second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen- The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
the RKE is pushed.
dently by pushing the lenses.
Interior Lights
Push the lens once to turn the light on.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Push Lenses
To turn the light off, push the lens a second time.
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. The Battery Protection also includes the glove
compartment light and the trunk light. To restore interior
light operation after automatic battery protection is enabled (Lights OFF), either place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
Front Map/Reading Lights Push Lenses
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch and is located on the drivers side of the
instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light located in the overhead console, door handle
lights, under I/P lights, door map pocket lights, and
cubby bin lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position. The interior lights will
remain off when the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC/DID, and radio when the
position lights or headlights are on.
Battery Saver Feature
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control completely moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights. interior lights were switched on manually or are on
The interior lights will remain on when the instrument because a door is open.
panel dimmer control is in this position.
Dome Light Position
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper Operation
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
windshield wiper/washer lever on the right side of the
steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever.
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Windshield Wiper Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: If snow packing occurs that obstructs the normal
operation of the windshield wipers the following message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID):
⬙Front Wipers Blocked Cycle Switch or Clean the Windshield⬙. It is important to remove the snow accumulation
to allow the wipers to function normally and to maintain
good visibility of the road.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
Windshield Washer Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
position, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
then turn off.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
WARNING!
3
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
Mist Control
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windThis feature senses moisture on the windshield and
shield.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
to activate this feature.
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect SetThe sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
further information.
sensitive, and wiper delay position four is the most
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
sensitive. Setting three should be used for normal rain
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
conditions. Settings one and two can be used if the driver
following conditions:
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
in the OFF position when not using the system.
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
NOTE:
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
120 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) 20 mph (32 km/h).
button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
To Increase Speed
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
speed.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph)
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
continue to decrease until the button is released, then The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
the new set speed will be established.
vehicle set speed.
Metric Speed (km/h)
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the moderate hills is normal.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
continue to decrease until the button is released, then Control.
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
the vehicle ahead.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
appropriate distance between vehicles.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
Control Mode” in this section.
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
NOTE:
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, the mode selected.
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for approximately 3 minutes in the stop position.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
3 minutes the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — Distance Setting Increase
6 — Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) On/Off
7 — Distance Setting Decrease
8 — CANC/Cancel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE0 mph (0 km/h).
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the brakes are overheated.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or • When the driver door is open.
Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC/DID displays “Adap- To Activate/Deactivate
tive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the EVIC/DID
displays “ACC Ready.”
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the EVIC/DID will
display “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
WARNING! (Continued)
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The
EVIC/DID will display the set speed.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC/DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
The following conditions cancel the system:
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be • The brake pedal is applied.
the current speed of the vehicle.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The ignition is turned OFF.
• Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
To Resume
• Driver door is opened at low speeds.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
NOTE: If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than pedal. The EVIC/DID will display the last set speed.
3 minutes, the parking brake will be activated, and the
NOTE:
ACC system will be cancelled.
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push the
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
memory if:
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
is pushed.
in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Turn Off
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rebutton is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
flected in the EVIC/DID.
in the EVIC/DID.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The decrease in set speed is respeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the EVIC/DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
NOTE:
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • When you override and push the SET + button or SET decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downwill automatically slow the vehicle.
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to main• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full stop
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, after two
exceeds normal range (overheated).
seconds the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to Setting The Following Distance In ACC
reengage the ACC to the existing Set Speed.
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
• The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for two seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds, the
ACC system will display a message that the system
will release the brakes and that the brakes must be
applied manually. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the EVIC/DID.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Set- • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
ACC Activation).
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; how(shorter).
ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the necessary.
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
same lane, the EVIC/DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle
ACC system applies the brakes.
Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
of the set speed.
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC/DID and a chime will
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
speed.
braking capacity.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to
a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle
Brake Alert
coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion
NOTE: The “Brake!” Screen in the EVIC/DID is a warn- without the need for any driver action.
ing for the driver to take action and does not necessarily
mean that the Forward Collision Warning system is If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the driver
applying the brakes autonomously.
will either have to push the RES (resume) button, or
apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
existing Set Speed.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately 3 consecutive minutes, the
parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system will
be cancelled.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC/DID displays the current ACC system settings. The EVIC/DID is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays depends
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the on ACC system status.
driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
will be cancelled.
the following displays in the EVIC/DID:
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering Display Warnings And Maintenance
wheel) and the following will display in the EVIC/DID:
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
ACC SET
Warning
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when
instrument cluster.
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following: This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
• System Cancel
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
• Driver Override
dirt or ice. In these cases, the EVIC/DID will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and
• System Off
the system will deactivate.
• ACC Proximity Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
• ACC Unavailable Warning
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
• The EVIC/DID will return to the last display selected
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
after five seconds of no ACC display activity
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when • Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar • If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
section.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
vehicle behind the lower grille.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- simply reactivating it.
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the EVIC/DID
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
will display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
performance.
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
your authorized dealer.
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an afterdriving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW
market grille or modifying the grille is not recomsystem will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
ACC/FCW operation.
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
NOTE:
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the condition that created limited functionality is Precautions While Driving With ACC
no longer present, the system will return to full function- In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
ality.
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectNOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean edly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more intervene.
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or Offset Driving
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Service ACC/FCW Warning
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/ out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Turn Or Bend Example
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTurn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changSpeed Control ON. When the vehicle has
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conreached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
trol mode.
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON- U.S. Speed (mph)
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
speed control is SET.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To Vary The Speed Setting
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
To Increase Speed
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conin the EVIC/DID display.
trol is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
Metric Speed (km/h)
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC/DID display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reThe speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
flected in the EVIC/DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Cancel
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the • The CANCEL button is pushed.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysflected in the EVIC/DID display.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
• The gear selector is removed from the Drive position. MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
To Resume Speed
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
20 mph (32 km/h).
visual warnings (within the EVIC/DID), and may apply
To Turn Off
a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are
intended to provide the driver with enough time to react,
memory if:
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
two seconds and then release the brakes.
3
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate
FCW Message
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
will be deactivated until the next key cycle.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If The forward collision button is located on the switch
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should panel below the Uconnect display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
• Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW sensitivity - Near vs. Far. Far warns
the driver of a possible collision earlier and Near
warns the driver later.
• Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Forward Collision Button
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (LED turns
off).
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
NOTE:
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
driver after ignition shut down.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
Panel” for further information.
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
higher rate of speed.
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows FCW Limited Warning
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
If the EVIC/DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking
may not be fully available. Once the condition that
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
limited the system performance is no longer present, the LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
system will return to its full performance state. If the detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
If the system turns off, and the EVIC/DID displays:
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
or Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
LaneSense Operation
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above When only a single lane marking is detected and the
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
Service FCW Warning
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
visual warning through the EVIC/DID to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be
provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
LaneSense Warning Button
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the LaneSense
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
below the Uconnect display.
shown in the Driver Information Display (DID).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the personalization settings.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect system screen.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control,
forward collision warning, etc.)
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
EQUIPPED
system will become active again if the vehicle speed is
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
and audible indications of the distance between the rear (9 km/h).
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. ParkSense Sensors
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
system and recommendations.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
changed to the ON/RUN position.
direction, depending on the location, type and orientaParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in tion of the obstacle.
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System. If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
EVIC/DID. It provides visual warnings to indicate the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
further information.
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
ParkSense Display
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.
ParkSense Warning Display
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
3
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(200150 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
None
None
None
None
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Radio Volume Reduced
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
No
79-59 in
(200150 cm)
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
Continuous
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
Uconnect display.
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
will be ON.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
system, the instrument cluster will display the ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
ParkSense Switch
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition,
the EVIC/DID will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the EVIC/DID, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN- • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
SORS” appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
properly.
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
affect the performance of ParkSense.
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once
OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,
etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
position and ParkSense is turned OFF, the EVIC/DID
SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
will display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
EVIC/DID.
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
(Continued)
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear
and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing
up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking function by pushing the gas pedal, turning ParkSense off
via ParkSense switch, or changing the gear while the
automatic brakes are being applied.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not The automatic braking function is intended to assist the
available.
driver in avoiding possible collisions with detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE gear.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense Park NOTE:
Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
• The automatic braking function may only be applied if
vehicle.
the vehicle deceleration is not enough to avoid collid• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
ing with a detected obstacle.
substitute the driver.
• The automatic braking function may not be applied
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle’s
fast enough for obstacles that move toward the rear of
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
the vehicle from the left and/or right sides.
vehicle’s movements.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limitadisabled from the Customer-Programmable Features
tions of this system and recommendations.
section of the Uconnect System.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
for the automatic braking function through ignition
changed to the ON/RUN position.
cycles.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE
and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will
appear in the EVIC/DID indicating the vehicle speed is
too fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system, six sensors will be located in
the rear fascia/bumper. Refer to the ⬙ParkSense Active
Park Assist System⬙ section for further information.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect System.
Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or
7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for further information.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
ParkSense Display
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
Rear Park Assist
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
3
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs —
Center
Arcs —
Right
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(200150 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
None
None
None
None
1st Flashing
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
None
6th Solid
None
None
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Radio Volume Reduced
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
No
79-59 in
(200150 cm)
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Yes
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150(120120 cm)
100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
Continuous
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Front Park Assist
When the vehicle is in DRIVE the ParkSense Warning
screen will be displayed when an obstacle is detected.
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center front region, the
display will show a single arc in the center front region.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display
will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle. A
fast sound tone will be produced when reaching the 2nd
flashing arc and will change to a continuous sound tone
when the 1st flashing arc appears.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right front
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right front region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
3
No Tone/Solid Arc
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
No Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Distance
(in/cm)
Arcs — Left
Arcs — Center
Arcs — Right
Audible Alert
Chime
Radio Volume
Reduced
Greater than
47 in (120 cm)
None
None
None
None
No
WARNING ALERTS
47-39 in
39-25 in
(120-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
None
None
4th Solid
3rd Flashing
None
None
None
None
No
No
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
2nd Flashing
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
1st Flashing
Continuous
Yes
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa(chime) after approximately three seconds when an obtion.
stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime volume
settings will not be accessible from the EVIC/DID.
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
3
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
through ignition cycles.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or 7⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the gear selector is moved to
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic
display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILthe vehicle is in REVERSE.
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILThe ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNdisabled or requires service. The ParkSense switch LED
AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for
will be OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be
switch is pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED
rear sensor location depending on where the fault is
will be ON.
detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System
for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected
SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle
FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAIL- graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds.
When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cleaning The ParkSense System
Center (EVIC) or ⬙ Driver Information Display (DID)” for Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
further information.
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damor ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN- age the sensors.
SORS⬙ appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear NOTE:
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and
• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see
operating properly.
an authorized dealer.
• Construction equipment, large trucks, and other vibraIf the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REtions could affect the performance of ParkSense.
QUIRED⬙ message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an
authorized dealer.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once
you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it
on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF” for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the • There may be a delay in the object detection rate if the
object is moving. This will cause the automatic braking
radio when it is sounding a tone.
application to be delayed.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
CAUTION!
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system
off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.
are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is intended to
assist the driver during parallel and perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a proper parking space,
providing audible/visual instructions, and controlling
the steering wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver’s parking maneuver
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver
side or passenger side).
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects, and
must intervene as required.
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not to
substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed to
remove their hands from the steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the driver will be required to
manually complete the parking maneuver.
The system will also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differences
such as over or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active
Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be enabled
and disabled with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, snow, display.
etc., or if searching for a parking space that has
surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at least 30
miles accumulated before the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system is fully calibrated and performs accurately. This is due to the system’s dynamic vehicle
calibration to improve the performance of the feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn off
automatically for any of the following conditions:
• The parking maneuver is completed.
• Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h) when
searching for a parking space.
• Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h) during
active steering guidance into the parking space.
• Touching the steering wheel during active steering
guidance into the parking space.
ParkSense Active Park Assist Switch
• pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist
switch.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once (LED turns •
on).
•
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system, push
the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again (LED turns •
off).
The Driver’s door is opened.
The trunk is opened.
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-lock Braking System
intervention.
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE.
If the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the EVIC/DID will instruct
the driver to complete the maneuver manually.
NOTE: If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the EVIC/DID will instruct the driver
to slow down. If the vehicle is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The
driver must then reactivate the system by pushing the
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only oper- ParkSense Active Park Assist switch.
ate and search for a parking space when the following • The outer surface and the underside of the front and
conditions are present:
rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction.
• The gear position is in DRIVE.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active Park
• The ignition is in the RUN position.
Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then the LED
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated. will turn OFF if any of the above conditions are not
present.
• The Driver’s door is closed.
• The trunk is closed.
• Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Operation/
Display
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled
the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for Perpen- • The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
dicular Park” message will appear in the Driver Informaparking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
tion Display (DID). You may switch to perpendicular
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protrudparking if you desire. Push the OK button on the left side
ing into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
steering wheel switch to change your parking space
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
setting.
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
NOTE:
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you • The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
parking space for the maneuver).
if the turn signal is not activated.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Active ParkSense Searching
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
When an available parking space has been found, and the Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
forward to position the vehicle for a parallel parking from the steering wheel.
sequence.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
3
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the REOnce the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed wait for steering to complete.
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
The system will then instruct the driver to check their NOTE:
surroundings and move backward.
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
3
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — STOP
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
3
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
The system will then instruct the driver to check their When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
surroundings and move forward.
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
When the driver places the gear selector into the RE- The system will then instruct the driver to check their
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to surroundings and move backward.
wait for steering to complete.
3
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. When
the maneuver is complete, the driver will be instructed to
check the vehicle’s parking position. If the driver is
satisfied with the vehicle position, they should shift to
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Operation/Display
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK for
Perpendicular Park” message will show in the DID
display. Push the OK button on the left side steering
wheel switch to change your parking space setting to a
perpendicular maneuver. You may switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular parking
maneuver, the “Active ParkSense Searching - Press OK
for Parallel Park” message will appear in the DID display.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
NOTE:
• When searching for a parking space, use the turn
signal indicator to select which side of the vehicle you
want to perform the parking maneuver. The ParkSense
Active Park Assist system will automatically search for
a parking space on the passenger’s side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
• The driver needs to make sure that the selected
parking space for the maneuver remains free and clear
of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
Active ParkSense Searching Display
• The driver is responsible to ensure that the selected
parking space is suitable for the maneuver and free/
clear of anything that may be overhanging or protruding into the parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When seeking for a parking space, the driver should
drive as parallel or perpendicular (depending on the
type of maneuver) to other vehicles as possible.
• The feature will only indicate the last detected parking
space (example: if passing multiple available parking
spaces, the system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been found, and the
vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to move
forward to position the vehicle for a perpendicular
parking sequence.
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be instructed to
stop the vehicle’s movement and remove your hands
from the steering wheel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
3
Parking Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From
Wheel
Parking Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into the REOnce the vehicle is at a standstill with your hands VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
removed from the steering wheel, you will be instructed wait for steering to complete.
to place the gear selector into the REVERSE position.
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
The system will then instruct the driver to check their NOTE:
surroundings and move backward.
• It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake and
accelerator during the semi-automatic parking maneuver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
• When the system instructs the driver to remove their When the vehicle has reached the end of its backward
hands from the steering wheel, the driver should check movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
their surroundings and begin to back up slowly.
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will allow a
maximum of six shifts between DRIVE or REVERSE. If
the maneuver cannot be completed within six shifts,
the system will cancel and the DID will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
3
• The system will cancel the maneuver if the vehicle
speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during active steering
guidance into the parking space. The system will
provide a warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then responsible
for completing the maneuver if the system is canceled.
• If the system is canceled during the maneuver for any
reason, the driver must take control of the vehicle.
Check Surroundings — STOP
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
When the driver places the gear selector into the DRIVE
position, the system may instruct the driver to wait for
steering to complete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
3
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
The system will then instruct the driver to check their When the vehicle has reached the end of its forward
surroundings and move forward.
movement, the system will instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and stop the vehicle’s movement.
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the driver
will be instructed to place the gear selector into the
REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE: It is the drivers responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check their
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
surroundings and be prepared to stop the vehicle either
when instructed to, or when driver intervention is re- When the driver places the gear selector into the REquired.
VERSE position, the system may instruct the driver to
wait for steering to complete.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
3
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Check Surroundings — Move Backwards
The system will then instruct the driver to check their Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park position.
surroundings and move backward.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will be
instructed to check the vehicle’s parking position. If the
driver is satisfied with the vehicle position, they should
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
shift to PARK. The ⬙Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position⬙ message will be momentarily displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
CAUTION!
• The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is only a
parking aid and it is unable to recognize every
obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not detected at
all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system in order to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It
is recommended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing parallel or
perpendicular parking maneuvers even when using
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind and in front of your vehicle,
look behind and in front of you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up and moving
forward. You are responsible for safety and must
continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear license plate.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition
is switched to the OFF position.
A touch screen button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via a touch screen
button personalization entry in the camera settings
menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
ParkView Camera Location
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera position.
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the
the navigation or audio screen appears again.
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
delay turned ON), the camera image will continue to be
the vehicle.
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Power sunroof and power
sunshade switches may also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof/Sunshade
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Center Buttons
There are two map/reading light buttons located in the
center of the overhead console that allow the lights to
operate independently.
Push the button once to turn the light on.
To turn the light off, push the button a second time.
Overhead Console — Power Sunroof
Front Map/Reading Lights
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights Center Buttons
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The lights also turn on when a door is opened.
The two map/reading lights can be operated indepen- The lights will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on
the RKE is pushed.
dently by pushing the lenses.
Sunglass Bin Door
Push the lens once to turn the light on.
Front Map/Reading Lights — With Push Lenses
To turn the light off, push the lens a second time.
The overhead console has a compartment which provides
storage for a pair of sunglasses.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a rear mounted or
front mounted sunglass bin door.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
open. Push the chrome pad on the sunglass bin door to
close.
Front Map/Reading Lights Push Lenses
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
3
Sunglass Bin Door — Rear Mounted
Sunglass Bin Door — Front Mounted
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sun visor NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
designate the three different HomeLink channels.
Alarm is active.
The HomeLink indicator is located above the center
button.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
HomeLink Indicator And Buttons
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door indicator flashes.
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required NOTE:
by federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
a garage door opener without these safety features. Call
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT
the button that is normally used to open and close the
door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
transmitter button.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indirelease the button.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Proand then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
gramming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Reremaining steps.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to
follow these steps:
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with “Pro- door or gate motor.
gramming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to NOTE:
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programprogram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
in view.
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take (Canadian/Gate Operator)
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
3
Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
pushed again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucPush the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs.
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
stop the sunroof.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
Wind Buffeting
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
will cancel this feature.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrurence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with ment Panel” for further information.
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Relearn Procedure
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to For vehicles equipped with a single-pane sunroof, there
is a relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate the
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
sunroof when the “Auto Up” feature stops working. To
reset the sunroof, follow these steps:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed position.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located to the left
3. Push and hold the Close switch. The sunroof will hit between the sun visors on the overhead console.
the hard stop and move to the Vent position after 10
seconds.
4. Release the Close switch, then push and hold the
Close switch again within 5 seconds to begin the
teaching process. The sunroof will complete one full
cycle and return to the Fully Closed position.
NOTE: If the Close switch is released anytime during the
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated
starting from the first step.
5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
position, release the Close switch. The sunroof is now
reset and ready to use.
Power Sunroof Switches
The power shade switches are located to the right between the sun visors on the overhead console.
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Power Shade Switches
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
(Continued)
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
Push the sunroof switch rearward and release it within
held again.
one-half second. The sunroof will open automatically to
the full open position and automatically stop. (If the Closing Sunroof — Express
sunshade is in the closed position when the operation is
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
open position prior to the sunroof opening). This is called
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati“Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Express
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward.
The sunroof will (if the sunshade is in the closed position
when the operation is initiated the sunshade will automatically open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening) open to the full open position and
automatically stop. Any release of the switch will stop the
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of the
Push and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button within one-half secshade switch will stop the shade.
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This
is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward.
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
The shade will open and stop automatically at the
NOTE: If the sunshade is in the closed position when the half-open position. Push and hold the shade switch
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically rearward again and the shade will open automatically to
cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof the full-open position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially
opening to the Vent position.
opened condition until the switch is pushed again.
Opening Power Shade — Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within Closing Power Shade — Express
Venting Sunroof — Express
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to
the halfway position and stop automatically. Push the
switch a second time from the halfway position and the
shade will automatically open to the full open position
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any
position. If the sunroof is completely closed the shade
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the shade.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
NOTE: If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button again in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
will automatically close both the sunroof and shade a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
completely.
Wind Buffeting
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
the glass panel.
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Ignition Off Operation
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to “battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
will cancel this feature.
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the to the battery and powered at all times.
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer NOTE: All accessories connected to the “battery” powProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru- ered outlets should be removed or turned off when the
ment Panel” for further information.
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
3
Front Center Console Outlet
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR cigar knob
and element must be used.
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
CAUTION! (Continued)
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
forward wall of the center console storage bin, below the
media center. This outlet can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles
will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset.
3
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
Power Inverter Outlet
The cupholders are located in the center console forward
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. of the armrest between the front seats.
The outlet automatically turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
3
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
Rear Seat Cupholders
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment handle is equipped with
a lock. To lock the glove compartment, remove the
emergency key from the key fob, insert emergency key
into glove compartment handle lock cylinder and turn
the key to the lock position and remove the key. Use the
reverse sequence to unlock the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment Release Handle
Console Features
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
There is a front center console storage area located under
the center console cupholder.
• To access the front center console storage area push the
release button and pull rearward.
NOTE: The center console cupholder can be placed in
Center Console Armrest Storage
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of any position to maintain access to the storage area.
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
The armrest can be slid forward/rearward to allow
driver/passenger comfort position.
3
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Center Console Cupholder Release
Front Center Console Storage
Located inside the center console storage compartment is
a line that indicates how much storage is allowed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
3
Storage Compartment Fill Line
NOTE: Filling the console storage area above this line
may impede the sliding of the cupholder.
Located inside the front of the console storage area power
cords can be routed from the storage area to the center
console pass-through.
Center Console Storage Passage
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas with a bottle
holder.
Front Center Console Pass-Through
Front Door Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
CARGO AREA FEATURES
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage Equipped
compartment.
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.
Rear Armrest Storage
3
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seatback Loops
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
Folded Rear Seatback
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
WARNING! (Continued)
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
(Continued)
(Continued)
3
312 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
Grocery Bag Hooks
The rear cargo area is equipped with grocery bag hooks,
located on either side of the rear cargo area.
Grocery Bag Hooks
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum weight limit 35 lbs
(16 kg) of the grocery bag hook. Damage may occur to
hook and mounting surface.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 313
Ski Pass-Through
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear Rear Window Defroster
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
The rear window defroster button is located on
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
door.
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15
minutes. For an additional 5 minutes of operation, push
the button a second time.
Ski Pass-Through
3
314 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .318 䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .322
▫ Instrument Cluster Messages . . . . . . . .
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .324
▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . .
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . .
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .349
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Instrument Cluster Messages . . . . . . . .
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .355
. . . . .357
. . . . .358
. . . . .360
. . . . .366
. . . . .368
. . . . .370
. . . . .371
. . . . .373
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items . . . . . . . .378 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .402
䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Manual Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Manual Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .400
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
䡵 USB PORT AND AUX JACK — IF EQUIPPED . .400
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .422
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .447
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— EVIC/DID Controls
— Instrument Cluster
— Cruise Controls
— Ignition Switch
6 — Radio Screen
7 — Passenger Air Bag
8 — Glove Compartment
9 — Radio Controls
10 — Climate Controls
11 — Steering Wheel
12 — Hood Release
13 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
Base Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Instrument Cluster
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Tachometer
5. Temperature Gauge
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem(RPM x 1000).
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
satisfactorily.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temshows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
perature when driving in hot weather or up moun(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infortain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument
upper limits of the normal operating range.
Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Premium Driver Information Display (DID) Instrument Cluster
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
1. Tachometer
5. Temperature Gauge
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem(RPM x 1000).
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. Driver Information Display (DID)
satisfactorily.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temshows the Driver Information Display (DID) mesperature when driving in hot weather or up mounsages. Refer to “Driver Information Display” in
tain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
upper limits of the normal operating range.
information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
•
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is palaced
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the position ON/RUN position.
sary.
The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light
does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
position.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed to
cool whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If
Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there a single chime will sound.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
(Continued)
Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
— If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light
This light indicates a potential system fault with the FCW system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when
the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Light
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to
“Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has
been turned on. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control ” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If
Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is engaged and the target vehicle
is detected. Refer to ⬙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle⬙ for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting
Display Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Distance Setting Display Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is engaged. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The EVIC Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
The 3.5” Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• Vehicle Info
display is located in the instrument cluster.
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Settings
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu
items (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel
Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Messages,
Screen Set Up, Settings).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
EVIC Controls
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items ( Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Fuel Economy, Trip A,
Trip B, Audio, Messages, Screen Set Up,
Settings).
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFTarrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
• OK Button
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
Push the OK button to access/select the information
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu item. Push
following procedure.
and hold the OK button for one second to reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
Oil Change Reset
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Oil Change Due
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC for five seconds after a single chime 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
OFF/LOCK position.
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval The Oil Life can also be reset through the Electronic
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) screen.
style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life Instrument Cluster Messages
Screen In The EVIC And Holding OK
• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
arrow button to • Service Airbag System
2. Push and release the DOWN
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve• Traction Control Off
hicle Info.”
• Washer Fluid Low
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the “Oil Life” screen.
• Oil Pressure Low
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset of the Oil Life. • Oil Change Due
5. Push and release the UP
screen.
arrow button to exit the
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
• Service Power Steering
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• Cruise Off
• Lights On
• Cruise Ready
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
• Turn Signal On
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to •
XX”
•
• Service Tire Pressure System
•
• Parking Brake Engaged
•
• Brake Fluid Low
•
• Service Electronic Braking System
•
• Engine Temperature Hot
•
• Battery Voltage Low
•
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
•
Vehicle Not in Park
Key in Ignition
Key in Ignition Lights On
Remote Start Active Key to Run
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted Door Open
Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Service Shifter
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Washer Fluid Low
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Door Open
EVIC Selectable Menu Items
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Service Transmission
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted
in the EVIC.
Speedometer
or DOWN
arrow button
Push and release the UP
until the Speedometer Menu displays in the EVIC
arinformation display. Push and release the RIGHT
row button to toggle between MPH and km/h and push
the OK button to select your speedometer display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the EVIC
pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
information display. Push and release the RIGHT
color than the other tire pressure value.
arrow button and Coolant Temp will be displayed.
Push the LEFT
or RIGHT
arrow button to scroll If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
through the information submenus and push the OK Pressure System” is displayed.
button to select or reset the following resettable subTire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
menus:
reset. Push and release the LEFT
arrow button to
Tire Pressure
return to the main menu.
Vehicle Info
or DOWN
arrow button Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
Push and release the UP
until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the EVIC infor- under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
arrow
mation display. Push and release the RIGHT
button and one of the following will be displayed:
If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
ICON.
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Coolant Temperature
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
Only
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
Oil Temperature
• Hold OK button to reset average fuel economy inforOil Life
mation.
Battery Voltage
Trip Info
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until
the
Trip
Menu
item
is
highlighted
in the EVIC.
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
or
RIGHT
arrow
button to
Toggle
the
LEFT
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in
select
Trip
A
or
Trip
B.
The
Trip
information
will
the EVIC information display.
display the following:
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value displayed and one without the Current Value displayed: • Distance
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
• Average Fuel Economy
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
allows you to change what information is displayed in
the instrument cluster as well as the location that
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
information is displayed.
until the Audio Menu displays in the EVIC information display.
Vehicle Settings (EVIC) — If Equipped
Audio
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Messages Menu displays in the EVIC information display. This feature shows the number of
arstored warning messages. Pushing the RIGHT
row button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the EVIC
information display. Push and release the OK button
to enter the submenus. The Screen Setup feature
Settings
1
2
3
4
5
Language
Select
Units Select
FCW
Sensitivity
ParkSense
Blind Spot
Alert
Translation
Message
Language
Units
FCW
Sensitivity
ParkSense
Blind Spot
Alert
Submenu
English, Spanish,
French
U.S., Metric
Near, Far
Off, Sound Only,
Sound & Display
Off, Lights Only,
Lights & Chime
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings
6
7
8
9
10
11
Hill Start
Assist
Auto Lock
Doors
Auto
Unlock
Doors
Passive
Entry
Remote
Unlock
Sequence
Key Fob
Linked to
Memory
Translation
Message
Hill Start
Asst
Auto Lock
Doors
Auto Unlock
Doors
Submenu
On, Off
Settings
12
On, Off
On, Off
Passive Entry
On, Off
Remote
Unlock
Driver Door, All
Doors
Key in
Memory
On, Off
13
14
15
Remote
Start
Comfort
System
Sound Horn
with
Remote
Start
Sound Horn
with
Remote
Lock
Flash Lights
with Lock
Translation
Message
Rmt Start
Comfort
Submenu
Off, Remote
Starts Only, All
Starts
Horn w/
Rmt Start
On, Off
Horn w/
Rmt Lock
Off, 1st Press,
2nd Press
Lights w/
Lock
On, Off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Settings
16
17
18
19
20
Daytime
Running
Lights
Automatic
Highbeams
Headlights
On with
Wipers
Rain
Sensing
Wipers
Headlights
Off Delay
Translation
Message
Daytime
Lights
Auto
Highbeams
Lights w/
Wipers
Submenu
Settings
On, Off
21
On, Off
22
On, Off
24
Lights Off
Delay
Lights w/
Unlock
On, Off
23
Auto Wipers
Key-Off
Power
Delay
Illuminated
Approach
Translation
Message
Power Off
Delay
0 seconds, 30
seconds, 60
seconds, 90
seconds
25
Easy Exit
Seat
Tilt Mirror
in Reverse
Compass
variance
Easy Exit
Seat
Tilt Mirror in
R
Compass Var
Submenu
Off, 45 seconds,
5 minutes, 10
minutes
0 seconds, 30
seconds, 60
seconds, 90
seconds
On, Off
On, Off
See Owner’s
Manual, X
Increment
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings
Translation
Message
Compass Cal
26
Calibrate
Compass
27
Brake
Service
Brake Service
Auto Park
Brake
Auto Park
Brake
28
Submenu
Push > to
calibrate the
compass
Follow the VF
specifically for
this one
On, Off
• Time
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)
2. Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Time
1. Upper Left
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• None
• Compass (default)
• Outside Temp
• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
NOTE: Defaults will change to Average Economy • Trip B
L/100km (or MPG) UR, Range UL if the proxies for
• Audio Information
Compass and Outside Temp are not available
• Menu Title (default)
3. Center
• None
• Digital Speedo
• Compass
4. Current Gear
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range To Empty
• Average Economy
• Current Economy
• Trip A
• On
• Off (default)
5. Defaults (defaults: Compass UR, Outside Temp UL,
Center Menu Title, Gear Display Off)
• Restore
• Cancel
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
The DID Main Menu items consists of the following:
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- • Speedometer
interactive display that is located in the instrument
• Vehicle Info
cluster.
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio Info
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Driver Information Display (DID)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Arrow Button
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
wheel:
upward through the main menu and submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Audio, Messages,
Screen Setup).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver
Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip Info, Audio, Messages, Screen Setup).
• RIGHT Arrow Button
DID Controls
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• LEFT Arrow Button
cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
style.
access the information screens or sub-menu
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
screens of a main menu item.
time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position. To
• OK Button
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
Push the OK button to access/select the information OK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
screens or sub-menu screens of a main menu item. Push performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
and hold the OK button for one second to reset following procedure.
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the DID for five seconds after a single chime 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty
OFF/LOCK position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
The Oil Life can also be reset through the Driver Infor- NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
mation Display (DID) screen.
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Screen In The DID And Holding OK
Instrument Cluster Messages
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
arrow button to • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
2. Push and release the DOWN
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve- • Service Airbag System
hicle Info.”
• Traction Control Off
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
• Washer Fluid Low
access the “Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset of the Oil Life. • Oil Pressure Low
5. Push and release the UP
screen.
arrow button to exit the
• Oil Change Due
• Fuel Low
• Service Antilock Brake System
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Battery Voltage Low
• Service Power Steering
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Cruise Off
• Lights On
• Cruise Ready
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX KM/H
• Turn Signal On
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to •
XX”
•
• Service Tire Pressure System
•
• Parking Brake Engaged
•
• Brake Fluid Low
•
• Service Electronic Braking System
•
• Engine Temperature Hot
•
Vehicle Not in Park
Key in Ignition
Key in Ignition Lights On
Remote Start Active Key to Run
Remote Start Active Push Start Button
Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
• Remote Start Aborted Door Open
• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
• Service Transmission
• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
• Service Shifter
• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
• Washer Fluid Low
• Service Airbag System
• Service Airbag Warning Light
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Door Open
DID Selectable Menu Items
• Doors Open
• Gear Not Available
• Shift Not Allowed
• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is highlighted in the DID.
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
display. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button
and
one
of
the
following
will
be
displayed:
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Speedometer Menu displays in the informa- If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
arrow displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the
tion display. Push and release the RIGHT
button to toggle between km/h and MPH and push ICON.
the OK button to select your speedometer display.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire To
Vehicle Info
XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the tire
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button pressure values in each corner of the ICON with the
until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted in the infor- pressure value of the low tire displayed in a different
arrow color than the other tire pressure value.
mation display. Push and release the RIGHT
Speedometer
button and Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service Tire
or RIGHT
arrow button to scroll through Pressure System” is displayed.
LEFT
the information submenus and push the OK button to
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
select or reset the following resettable submenus:
arrow button to
reset. Push and release the LEFT
Tire Pressure
return to the main menu.
arrow button Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
Push and release the UP or DOWN
until “Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the information under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Coolant Temperature
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
Only
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Oil Temperature
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Equipped
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the information
display:
ACC SET
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the information display:
• Distance Setting Change
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Cancel
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap- • Driver Override
tive Cruise Control Off.”
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• System Off
Fuel Economy
• ACC Proximity Warning
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in
the information display.
• ACC Unavailable Warning
• The DID will return to the last display selected after • Two sub menu pages one with Current value disfive seconds of no ACC display activity.
played and one without the Current Value displayed:
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
LaneSense Menu — If Equipped
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys- • Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Trip Info
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the inforor RIGHT
arrow
mation display (Toggle LEFT
button to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information
will display the following:
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Messages Menu displays in the DID. This
feature shows the number of stored warning mesarrow button will allow
sages. Pushing the RIGHT
you to see what the stored messages are.
• Distance
Screen Setup
• Average Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
• Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Audio
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the Information
Display.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
• Time
1. Upper Left
• Range
• None
• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Compass
• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Outside Temp. (Default)
NOTE: Defaults will change to Average Economy
L/100km (or MPG) UR, Range UL if the proxies for
Compass and Outside Temp are not available
• Time
• Range
• Average Economy L/100km (or MPG)
• Current Economy L/100km (or MPG)
2. Upper Right
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp (Default)
3. Center
• None
• Compass
• Outside Temp
• Time
• Range
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
6. Fuel Gauge
• Trip A Distance
• Standard (Default)
• Trip B Distance
• Range
• Audio Information
7. Defaults
• Menu Title (Default )
• Restore
• Digital Speedo
• Cancel
4. Current Gear
CYBERSECURITY
• On
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
• Off (default)
5. Odometer
• On (Default)
• Off
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio
Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
UCONNECT SETTINGS
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Uconnect 8.4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons are located below the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e. 30, 60, 90) push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e. ON, OFF).
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect display.
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons located below the system.
Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect
screen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn
the screen on.
Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain
option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 5.0/8.4A/8.4AN Settings
Uconnect 5.0 — If a SETTINGS button on the faceplate
exists, push this button. If not, push the MORE button on
the faceplate and press the ⬙Settings⬙ button on the
touchscreen. The remaining settings are defined for the
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN — Press the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this
mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance (if
equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
equipped), Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Display
SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data (if After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
equipped).
the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
• Display Mode
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
This feature allows you to select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status, press and release the
Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights On
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with
the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
• Set Language
“Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
This feature allows you to select one of the languages for
setting has been selected.
all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set • Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
Language” button on the touchscreen and then press the When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
desired language button on the touchscreen until a will appear in the driver screen/EVIC/DID/Cluster discheck-mark appears next to the language, showing that play as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within
setting has been selected.
a programmed route. To turn on or enable, press the
• Units
“Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
This feature allows you to select US or Metric units of
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
measure in the EVIC/DID, odometer, and navigation
system (if equipped). Press “US” or “Metric” until a • Voice
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that This feature allows you to change the Voice Response
setting has been selected.
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,
• Touchscreen Beep
press the “Brief” (Brief is a shortened response for
advanced users) or “Detailed” (Detailed provides more
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound
comprehensive responses for new users) button on the
heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press the
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the • Set Time Minutes
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
Clock
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
following settings will be available:
down.
• Sync Time With GPS
• Time Format
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio
set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the This feature allows you to select the time format display
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen until a setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the touchcheck-mark appears next to the setting, showing that screen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or
24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
setting has been selected.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
• Set Time Hours
This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the
Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press
the “Show Time in Status Bar” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button
Vehicle”.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Active Braking —
able:
If Equipped
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Sensitivity — If
Safety & Driving Assistance
Equipped
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
When this feature is selected, it will apply the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision.
The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the
driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a
potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes
active at 5 mph (8 km/h) and is only enabled when FCW
is on.
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW is
the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving
experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a
possible collision when you are much closer to the For further information, refer to “Forward Collision
vehicle in front of you. To change the FCW status, press Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in “Understanding The
and release the “Near” or “Far” button.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
Vehicle”.
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
lane departures. The LaneSense Warning can be set to • ParkSense — If Equipped
provide either an “early”, “medium” or “late” warning The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
zone start point.
vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REFor further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn- VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
or Sound and Display. To change the ParkSense status,
Vehicle”.
press and release the checkbox for “Sound” or “Sound
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
and Display.”
When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
Refer to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of
steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
Your Vehicle” for system function and operating inforThe amount of directional torque the steering system can
mation.
apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
• Front ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
Front ParkSense volume settings can be selected from the
EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped). The chime
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and • Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir• Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped
rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the
Rear ParkSense volume settings can be selected from the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
EVIC/DID or Uconnect System (if equipped). The chime
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and
REVERSE. To enable or turn on, press the “Tilt Mirrors In
“HIGH.” The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
• Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If Equipped
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
When this feature is selected, the ParkSense system will selected.
detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize • Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
autonomous braking to help stop the vehicle (only enWhen this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
abled when ParkSense is also on).
can be set to Off, Lights Only or Lights and Chime. The
Refer to “ParkSense Rear Braking Assist” in “Under- Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system func- category. When this category is selected, the Blind Spot
tion and operating information.
Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime
category is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the
“Off,” “Lights” or “Lights & Chime” button on the
touchscreen.
center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If
Equipped
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines — If
Equipped
When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are
overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the width of the vehicle.
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. • ParkView Backup Camera Delay
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
in the BSM not operating to specification.
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
When this feature is selected, the system will automatiWhen this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to on the windshield and the wipers are set to an intermitillustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back tent position. To make your selection, press the “Rain
up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Sensing” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark • Hill Start Assist
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
This setting will hold the brake if the driver is on a hill
selected.
and takes their foot off the brake to accelerate.
• Electric Park Brake Service Mode — If Equipped
Lights
This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven sysfollowing settings will be available.
tem, to command the electric park brake retraction, to
service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, • Headlights Off Delay
rotors, etc.).
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
For further information, refer to “Electric Parking Brake the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
(EPD)” in “Starting and Operating.”
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
• Auto Park Brake
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
Auto Park Brake will set the park brake once the vehicle seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected.
is set in park (or at key off for a manual transmission)
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press
the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your desired
time interval.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
• Flash Lights With Lock
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
Doors & Locks
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch- when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
screen the following settings will be available:
Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob, or when using the passive
entry feature. This feature may be selected with or
• Auto Door Locks
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
The Auto Door Lock feature can be enabled, or disabled, your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” button
by your authorized dealer. Please visit your local autho- on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
rized dealer for further information.
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sound Horn With Remote
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated via the key fob. To make your
selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
selected.
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is prothe remote start is activated. To make your selection, grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
showing that setting has been selected. Select one of three touching the handle more than once will only result in
options to sound the horn, Off, 1st Press, or 2nd Press.
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob RKE Key Fob).
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is
used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
Vehicle”.
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
touchscreen, one of the following settings will be avail• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
able:
Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory
Linked To FOB” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected.
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat OR Auto-On Driver
Heated Seat & Steering wheel OR Auto-On Driver
Heated/Vented Seat OR Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented
Seat & Steering Wheel
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated/vented
seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on
when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented
seat will turn on. To make your selection, press “Off,”
“Remote Start Only,” OR “All Starts” checkbox until a
check-mark appears next to the setting option. Select
“Off,” “Remote Start Only” OR “All Starts” to determine
when the feature is activated.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Options
Engine Off Power Delay status, press the “0 seconds,”
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
“45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
touchscreen.
• Easy Exit Seat
• Headlight Off Delay
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
Seats” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
selected.
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Audio
• Speed Adjusted Volume
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
following settings will be available.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade • Surround Sound — If Equipped
settings. Press and drag the ’C’ icon, use the arrows to This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• AUX Volume Match
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your Phone/Bluetooth
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
directly on the desired setting.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Paired Phones
your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer • Subscription Information
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
• Paired Audio Sources
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
the Subscription Information screen in order to reto the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
subscribe.
SiriusXM Setup
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup button on the touch- access the Subscription Information screen.
screen the following settings will be available.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
• Channel Skip
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of the screen or visit the provider online.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to, or to NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make and is available for U.S. residents only.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Restore Settings
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings
are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To Clear Personal Data press the “Yes” or “No” button on the
touchscreen. A check mark will appear in the box when
selected.
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
USB PORT AND AUX JACK — IF EQUIPPED
Located in the front storage area of the center console,
this feature allows an external device, to be connected to
the audio system.
USB Port and AUX Jack
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
For further information, refer to the Uconnect User’s
Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
access the switches.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various audio modes available (AM/FM/
SXM/AUX, etc.).
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which audio mode you
are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation
while in mode.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
grammed in the radio preset button.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
Media Mode
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next not using Uconnect (if equipped).
track on the selected media (Disc, AUX, Bluetooth).
Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
found in radio frequency safety standards and recom2. This device must accept any interference received,
mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific
including interference that may cause undesired opcommunity.
eration.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
radio or television reception, which can be determined display.
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is Manual Climate Controls
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
more of the following measures:
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
• Increase the separation between the equipment and dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
receiver.
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Front Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Manual Climate Controls
1 — RECIRCULATION Control
2 — Front Blower Control
3 — MAX Air Conditioning
(A/C)
4 — Temperature Control
5 — Air Conditioning (A/C)
6 — REAR DEFROST Mode
7 — MODE Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates
warmer temperatures.
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning Operation
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning
(A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is
operating.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the
A/C is turned on automatically and the air is recirculated. A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
Panel Mode
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru(located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
airflow.
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the con- NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
denser, reducing air conditioning performance.
seat passengers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in Defrost Mode
any conditions other than full cold or full hot), between
Air is directed through the windshield and side
the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
Floor Mode
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C
small amount through the defrost and side win- button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help
dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these
dow demist outlets.
modes only when necessary.
Mix Mode
Recirculation Control
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode. Only use • In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior
defogging, select the outside air position.
rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot or humid
weather.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C
NOTE:
button.
button is pushed when
• If the RECIRCULATION
the system is in Defrost mode the Recirculation LED Economy Mode
indicator will flash three times and then turn off to If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to
indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temthe inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Buttons On Your Faceplate
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect touchscreen.
4
Uconnect 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Manual Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
4. Front Defrost Button
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. If the front defrost mode
is turned off the climate system will return the previous
setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. 6. Blower Control
The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes. For each additional press of this button, five Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
additional minutes will be added to the timer function. forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The 7. Modes
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
knob on the faceplate or buttons on the touchscreens as
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
follows:
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
as follows:
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
• Panel Mode
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
counterclockwise.
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
Buttons On The Touchscreen
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
area between the icons.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
• Bi-Level Mode
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windfloor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
shield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
when necessary.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con8. Climate Control OFF Button
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
9. Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect 8.4)
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount Provides temperature control. Press the button on the
of air is directed through the defrost and side faceplate for cooler temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touchscreen
window demister outlets.
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the
• Mix Mode
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window 10. Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4)
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
Provides temperature control. Press the button on the
snowy conditions.
faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
touchscreen, press and slide the button on the touch- Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
screen temperature bar towards the red arrow button on If Equipped
the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Buttons On Your Faceplate
11. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
The buttons on your faceplate are also accessible on the
Uconnect system touchscreen.
4
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into 5. Front Defrost Button
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
Press to change the current airflow setting to Defrost
2. A/C Button
mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumioutlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
nates when A/C is ON. Performing this function again
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode
temperature settings for best windshield and side winand the A/C indicator will turn off.
dow defrosting and defogging. Performing this function
3. Recirculation Button
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi- front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will
return the previous setting.
nates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature
(Uconnect 8.4)
Control
Down
Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect cooler temperature settings.
8.4)
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
Provides the passenger with independent temperature automatically exit Sync.
control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer
4
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. SYNC
Blower Control Knob On Your Faceplate
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
The blower speed increases as you turn the knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On Your Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
forced through the climate system. There are seven area between the icons.
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on your faceplate or the buttons on your touchscreen as follows:
10. Blower Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
11. Modes
• Bi-Level Mode
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
as follows:
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con• Panel Mode
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument warmer air from the floor outlets.
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
• Floor Mode
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
of air is directed through the defrost and side
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
window
demister outlets.
is a shut off wheel located adjacent to the air vanes to
shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
• Mix Mode
outlets.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4)
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer tem8.4)
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- the button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards
trol. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera- the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the temperature settings.
button on the touchscreen temperature bar towards the
blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera- NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
ture settings.
time.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem- • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler temperacated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
tures.
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
Climate Control Functions
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
A/C (Air Conditioning)
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.
Press to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings.
The button on the touchscreen illuminates when MAX
A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pushing other settings
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
selected setting and cause MAX A/C to exit.
needed.
NOTE:
4
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (recirculation button on
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On
systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in
the control button to blink and then turn off.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate the button on your
touchscreen and the button on your faceplate when either
button is selected. Push either button on your touchscreen or button on your faceplate a second time to turn
off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
into the vehicle.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on your faceplate or the button
on your touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasunits by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons. Once
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
the desired temperature is displayed, the system will
section of the manual.
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
system to function automatically.
Manual Operation Override
NOTE:
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation concold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts trol.
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
comfort as quickly as possible.
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
4
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
selected in Manual operation.
Winter Operation
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perforfrom each other. If any feature is controlled manually, mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functiontemperature control will continue to operate automati- ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concencally.
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
during Winter months is not recommended because it
suggested control settings for various weather condimay cause window fogging.
tions.
Vacation/Storage
Summer Operation
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
The engine cooling system must be protected with a (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corroconditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating. fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
Operating Tips
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility Outside Air Intake
of compressor damage when the system is started again. Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
Window Fogging
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
is clear of ice, slush and snow.
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation A/C Air Filter
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may The climate control system filters outside air containing
occur.
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au- totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucor eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. tions.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
these steps:
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
4
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect 5.0
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
Uconnect 8.4AN
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
4
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 5.0 Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
4
436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanone of the pre-defined messages and follow the system tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
I’ll be late.
No.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
I will be
<number>
Are you there
Call me.
minutes late.
yet?
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
4
438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel if equipped.
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
4
440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
Roadside Assistance Call
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
WiFi Hotspot***
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
**If vehicle is equipped.
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
***Extra charges apply.
9-1-1 Call
Security Alarm Notification
Vehicle Health Alert
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Remote Vehicle Start**
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Remote Horn and Lights
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
Yelp Search
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Voice Texting
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
4
442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Assist Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and
press Link.
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
your personalized music.
NOTE:
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
• Once you download the app to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere.
4
444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
to send a personalized text message. For details about
the beep, say the following command: “Send mesMAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
sage to John Smith.”
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
process your message.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445
TIP:
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
4
446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
Yelp
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice ComIf your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
mand.
use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings,
set reminders, and more. For further information go to
the
Mopar
Owner
Connect
website
moparownerconnect.com.
448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from so you can still place a second call without being interincoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes rupted by incoming calls.
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- NOTE:
nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPmissed calls and text messages while you were using Do
hones.
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text • Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
Do Not Disturb
and send it to voicemail.
General Information
Automatic reply messages can be:
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undetouchscreen while typing a custom message.
sired operation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449
NOTE:
Additional Information
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
• The term IC before the certification/registration num- trademarks of Yelp.
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciFor Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24
fications were met.
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .461
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
▫ Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .461
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .458
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .459
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
䡵 PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .469
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .472
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ SafeHold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Rain Brake Support (RBS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .483 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .483
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .504
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .509 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .523
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .524
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .512
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .536
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .522
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .540
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .549
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
(Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL
or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and
release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tip Start Feature
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
Cycle the ignition switch to START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself
when the engine starts.
when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
occurs, cycle the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
Extended Park Starting procedure.
procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
the procedure.
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
CAUTION!
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10
to 15 seconds before trying again.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
With Tip Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙, “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ and ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To
clear any excess fuel;
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it
2. Cycle the ignition to the START position and release it
as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
disengage automatically in 10 seconds.
3. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal.
4. Cycle the ignition to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driver’s side headlamp).
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will 2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
decrease as the engine warms up.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
quicker starts in cold weather.
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
driver’s side headlamp.
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the engine
block heater is recommended. For ambient temperatures
below -20°F (-29°C), the engine block heater is required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
NOTE:
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
• The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR dealer.
• The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
• The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
(Continued)
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the center console. The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the
gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or the Driver Information Display (DID).
To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate it, to
access the L or S position. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds (refer to
⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as
PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of FCA US’s current and future lineup of
FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration is refined
to optimize the customer’s driving experience and fuel
economy. By design, some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Standard Shifter
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift positions.
Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on vehicle speed.
Premium Shifter with Shift Paddles
The premium transmission gear selector (with manual
shift paddles mounted on the steering wheel) provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and SPORT shift
positions. Manual shifts can be made using the shift
paddles (refer to ⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section).
Pressing the shift paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or
SPORT position will manually select the transmission
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
NOTE: In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position
indicator will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can
be completed.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
Transmission Gear Selector
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicator should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission
gear position display and verify that it indicates the
PARK position (P).
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
DRIVE (D)
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downWARNING!
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characterispractices that limit your response to changing traffic tics under all normal operating conditions.
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
vehicle and have a collision.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
ing limits, the transmission controller may modify the
Normal operation will resume once the transmission
transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque,
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission dam- SPORT (S) — If Equipped
age due to overheating.
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
winds), use the shift paddles (if equipped, refer to
⬙Paddle Shift Mode⬙ in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using
a lower gear will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the ⬙Transmission Temperature Warning Light⬙ will illuminate, a warning message will appear in the EVIC/DID and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
access SPORT mode, push down on the gear selector and
rotate it fully clockwise.
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
Use this range for engine braking when descending very
following steps:
steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for increased engine braking. To access the LOW 1. Stop the vehicle.
position, push down on the gear selector and rotate it
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
fully clockwise.
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
turns OFF.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may 5. Restart the engine.
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi- 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
nated. Limp Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be
operation.
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
LOW (L) — If Equipped
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid is warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when
cold. This is normal. The torque converter clutch will
function normally once the transmission is sufficiently
warm.
PADDLE SHIFT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Paddle Shift mode is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. Paddle Shift allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and
downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving and many other situations.
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
In Paddle Shift mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT mode, it
will operate automatically, shifting between the nine
available gears. To activate Paddle Shift mode, simply tap
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-)
while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. In DRIVE mode, this
will activate a temporary Paddle Shift mode. The trans- • If Paddle Shift is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
mission will revert back to normal operation after a
transmission will automatically shift up when maxiperiod of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity.
mum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator
When the transmission gear selector is in the SPORT
pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to
position, tapping either shift paddle will activate ⬙permaautomatic operation.
nent⬙ Paddle Shift mode. The transmission will remain in
• If Paddle Shift is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
Paddle Shift mode until the driver deliberately disables
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
Paddle Shift (as described below). Tapping (-) to enter
when maximum engine speed is reached (except the
Paddle Shift mode will downshift the transmission to the
transmission will upshift automatically from 1st to 2nd
next lower gear, while using (+) to enter Paddle Shift
gear at wide open throttle, if necessary). Otherwise,
mode will retain the current gear. When Paddle Shift is
the transmission will upshift only when commanded
active, the current transmission gear is displayed in the
by the driver.
instrument cluster.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will
automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to a stop
(to prevent engine lugging) and will display the current gear. Tapping the (+) paddle (at a stop) will allow
starting in second gear. After a stop, the driver should
manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
accelerates.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift the
transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Paddle Shift mode is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage Paddle Shift mode, push and hold the (+)
shift paddle until “D” or “S” is once again indicated in
the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of Paddle
Shift mode at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
5
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the Acceleration
rear wheels.
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipAdditionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle when there is a difference in the surface traction under
launch and performance characteristics.
the front (driving) wheels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the park brake more convenient and useful.
The park brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
vehicle, make sure that the park brake is applied. Also, be
certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
You can engage the park brake in two ways;
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature in the customer programmable features section of
the Uconnect Settings.
The park brake switch is located in the center console.
5
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on the switch
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the park brake engages.
Once the park brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on
the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
pedal while you apply the park brake, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement. The park brake
can be applied even when the ignition switch if OFF,
however, it can only be released when the ignition switch
in the RUN position.
The park brake will release automatically when the
ignition is cycled to the RUN position, the transmission is
in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled,
and an attempt is made to drive away by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in the applied
position or 90 seconds in the released position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the RUN position. Press on the brake
pedal, then push the park brake switch down momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the
back of the vehicle while the parking brake disengages.
You may also notice a small amount of movement in the
brake pedal. Once the park brake is fully disengaged, The
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the parking
brake will automatically engage whenever the transmission is placed into PARK. Once the park brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice a
small amount of brake pedal movement while the parking brake is engaging.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
NOTE: When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the park
brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The park brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to slow
the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake
system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the park brake while the vehicle is in motion,
maintain upward pressure on the electric park brake
switch for as long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be illuminated
automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the park brake while the vehicle is in
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a
complete stop using the park brake, when the vehicle
reaches approximately 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the park brake
will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the Electric Park
Brake system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp
flashing. In this case, urgent service of the electric park
brake system is required. Do not rely on the park brake to
hold the vehicle stationary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Auto Park Brake
the vehicle is left unsecured. If the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is unbuckled, the driver
door is open, the vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no
attempt to depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal,
the park brake will automatically engage to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.
The Electric Park Brake can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle is at a standstill and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection
through the customer programmable features section of
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pressing the
the Uconnect Settings.
Electric Park Brake Switch to the release position while
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
the driver door is open. Once manually bypassed, Safeby holding the EPB switch in the release position while
Hold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches
the transmission is being placed into PARK. This bypass
12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
can be reset by cycling the ignition off and back on again,
position and back to ON again.
or by driving the vehicle up to at least 12 mph (20 km/h),
or by going to the personal setting menu and turning the Brake Service Mode
Auto Park Brake function OFF and then back ON again.
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
SafeHold
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park Brake which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
System that will engage the park brake automatically if You should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake
service.
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the Electric Park Brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the Electric Park Brake
actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done
easily by entering the Brake Service Mode through EVIC
(Electronic Vehicle Information Center), Driver Information Display (DID) or the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu based system will guide you through
the steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The park brake must be unapplied.
• The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the Electric Park Brake fault lamp
will flash continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake Switch.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
BRAKE SYSTEM
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), and Dynamic
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required Steering Torque (DST).
with the power system operating.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
front axle.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
Brake System Warning Light
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
stay on for as long as four seconds.
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activais not functioning properly and that immediate service is
tion(s).
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brakSystem Warning Light” is not on.
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
•
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver •
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with Towing With HSA
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
will remain active.
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC/DID, perform
the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 3.
current setting, proceed as follows:
4.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
5.
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” 6.
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Apply the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right. wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
its previous setting.
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
Traction Control System (TCS)
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. EnThis system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may maintain the desired path.
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differpath of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differenthe intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approtial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
understeer condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push NOTE:
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
will turn off.
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud,
sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
accomplished by momentarily pushing the “ESC off”
by the ESC system is reduced.
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off”
button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine NOTE:
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momenmalfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authowill be ON even if it was turned off previously.
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
diagnosed and corrected.
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lowhen ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
that caused the ESC activation.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the ESC and EPS
modules that provides torque at the steering wheel for
certain driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering
wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/maintain
vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE: The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small torques
on the steering wheel, which means the effectiveness of
the DST feature is highly dependent on the drivers
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It is
very important to realize that this feature will not steer
the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for
steering the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15
LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Term
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
spare tires.
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
And Operating” section of this manual.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
tion of this manual.
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
NOTE:
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followcargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
capacity calculated in Step 4.
vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Conand load carry capacity of your vehicle.
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
• For the following example, the combined weight of
vehicle.
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
Metric Example For Load Limit
(392 kg).
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
meets the following criteria:
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
handling of your vehicle.
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
WARNING!
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
Snow Tires
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informaSome areas of the country require the use of snow tires
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
If you need snow tires, select tires
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
equivalent in size and type to the
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tire Spinning
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivatenance schedule is highly recommended.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
WARNING!
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
You could lose control and have a collision resulting equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart exin serious injury or death.
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little this manual for more information relating to the Load
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
Replacement Tires
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for those of the original wheels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
• For a 215/55R17 tire on a 17 x 7.0J x 41mm wheel, use
of a snow traction device with a maximum projection
of 9 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means
that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire
pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
normal and there should be no adjustment for this need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
increased pressure.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning The system will automatically update and the “Tire
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
information.
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn- For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
the tire.
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
Base System
failure or condition.
NOTE:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
while adjusting your tire pressure.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underin- readings to the receiver module.
flation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
ability.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components:
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure • Receiver Module
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor- • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
ing Telltale Light”.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
cluster, an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and
a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to 2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
TPMS sensors.
below the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
PRESSURE” and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on
that affects radio wave signals.
upon the next ignition cycle.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
housings.
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
Size Spare
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
or non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
the spare tire.
automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low- • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID).
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
TPMS to receive this information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
four active road tires. In addition, the Driver Information
readings to the receiver module.
Display (DID) will display an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly the low tire pressure values in a different color.
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
DID will return to their original color, and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the DID will display a
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
⬙SERVICE SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s received.
recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in
the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Service Warning
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, pro5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
viding the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Vehicles With Compact Spare
Light” will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE SYSTEM
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
will display a “SERVICE SYSTEM” message for five
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnseconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
ing limit, upon the next ignition cycle, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will sound.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
In addition, the graphic in the DID will still display a
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
different color pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
message.
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the graphic in
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the DID will display a “SERVICE
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
TPMS to receive this information.
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will General Information
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
(2) This device must accept any interference received, While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
including interference that may cause undesired opera- 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
tion.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immeNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
These engines are designed to meet all symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considemissions regulations and provide op- ering service for the vehicle.
timum fuel economy and performance Reformulated Gasoline
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
octane number of 87 as specified by burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spehigher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imwill not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in prove air quality.
these engines.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
CAUTION! (Continued)
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxyProblems that result from using gasoline containing more
genates such as ethanol.
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
CAUTION!
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso- Warranty.
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of Modifications that allow the engine to run on comthese blends may result in starting and drivability pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
problems, damage critical fuel system components, result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, system components. Problems that result from running
(Continued)
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• Operate in a lean mode.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Poor engine performance.
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
and diaphragm materials.
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines Fuel System Cautions
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perforCAUTION!
mance.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso- performance:
line contains a higher level of deter- • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
gents to further aide in minimizing
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perengine and fuel system deposits.
formance and damage the emissions control sysWhen available, the usage of Top Tier
tem.
Detergent gasoline is recommended. • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
Materials Added To Fuel
(Continued)
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
FLEXIBLE FUEL — IF EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements
NOTE:
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on • Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron
least 5 miles (8 km).
may be used.
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up. Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
When switching fuel types:
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formulated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
FCA Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
FCA US LLC engines.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
CAUTION!
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may compatible components can damage your vehicle.
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door and
release to open.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine
to start under cold conditions, may affect drivability,
and could cause engine damage.
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap
has been designed for use with this vehicle.
1. Place the vehicle in PARK (P) position and switch the
ignition LOCK/OFF.
Push To Open
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
3. Remove the fuel filler cap (gas cap) and hang by tether
hook on fuel filler door.
5
Fuel Filler Door And Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
1— Tether Hook
Fuel Filler Door
1— Tether Hook
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door around the entire perimeter to break the ice
buildup and re-open the door.
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
5. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
6. Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the center-rear edge
of the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel door
will close.
Push To Close
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator light
to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(Continued)
NOTE: If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
“clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label Payload
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
This label contains the month and year of manufacture, weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
Tire Size
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
the brakes operate.
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Loading
CAUTION!
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh- way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is your vehicle.
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the TRAILER TOWING
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Wheel OFF the Ground
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
On Trailer
Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
OK
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional dedisabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertails.
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer • If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
towing service, refer to “Towing A Disabled Vehicle”
in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
NOTE:
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
5. Turn the engine OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, but do not
Recreational towing for front-wheel drive models is
start the engine.
allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle 8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
9. Release the parking brake.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following 10. Turn the ignition OFF.
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
11. Remove the Key Fob.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
12. Release the brake pedal.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Models
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the power transfer
unit.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .555 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .569
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .570
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .560
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
6
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .592
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models . . . . . . . . .595
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .595
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank below the radio screen.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
may wear down your battery.
6
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Torque Patterns
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
against the wheel.
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
Tire Service Kit Storage
3. Remove the fastener securing the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under an access cover in
the trunk.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
6
Tire Service Kit Fastener
Pull Strap
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Remove Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— Sealant Bottle
— Deflation Button
— Pressure Gauge
— Power Button
— Mode Select Knob
— Sealant Hose (Clear)
— Air Pump Hose (Black)
— Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
6
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
562 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than
1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 563
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
6
564 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
valve stem.
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
before proceeding.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and turn Off the
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
ignition.
nails) from the tire.
4. Set the parking brake.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
Deflated Tire:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the • Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Sealant Mode position.
Service Kit.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap • After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 565
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Sealant Hose (6):
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
available. Make sure the engine is running before
empty.
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
use. Call for assistance.
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
6
566 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vepressure within 15 minutes:
hicle.”
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
CAUTION!
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 567
(D) Drive Vehicle:
(E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Mode position.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
6
568 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replaceand inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
ment.”
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflausing the Tire Service Kit.
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
Volt outlet.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
the vehicle.
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
service center.
housing.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 569
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
570 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack, wheel chocks and spare tire are stowed under
an access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access
the jack, wheel chocks and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Pull Strap
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 571
5. Remove the spare tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
4. Remove the scissors jack, wheel bolt wrench and
wheel chocks from the spare wheel as an assembly.
Remove the chocks from the jack assembly. Turn the
jack screw to the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench,
and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.
Jack And Spare Tire Fastener
6
572 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shifter into the park position.
5. Turn the ignition off to the LOCK position.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 573
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
6
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
Jacking Locations
1. Remove the jack, wheel bolt wrench and wheel chocks
from the spare wheel as an assembly. Remove the
chocks from the jack assembly.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
2. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally 5. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changclosest to the flat tire.
ing the right front tire, chock the left rear wheel. Place
both chocks under the tire.
3. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
4. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
6
Front Body Flange
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Rear Body Flange
Front Body Flange Engaged
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
7. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
6
Rear Body Flange Engaged
6. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the
jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange, centering the jack saddle between the locating notches on the
sill flange.
Front Jacking Location
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
9. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
Mounting Spare Tire
10. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
6
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
WARNING!
12. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased hard stop could endanger the occupants of the veleverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper repaired or replaced immediately.
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight- Road Tire Installation
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
13. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel 1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- 2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Securely stow
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
the jack, tools, chocks and flat tire. Release the
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
parking brake before driving the vehicle.
wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Bolt
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Road Wheel
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
6
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park- 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
handle counterclockwise.
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
properly seated against the wheel.
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts and lightly tighten.
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
chocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem- follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the precautions.
assembly using the means provided. Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
CAUTION!
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
6
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further inforcan often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator.
6
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
(Continued)
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
Manual Park Release location
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery), 2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is undera Manual Park Release is available.
neath the rubber storage bin liner in the center console
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:
pass-through.
1. Apply the parking brake.
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Manual Park Release Cover
Manual Park Release Tether
3. Unsnap the tether from the Manual Park Release lever, 4. Pull the tether to rotate the lever up and rearward,
and use it to pull the lever upwards.
until it locks vertically in place. Verify that the Manual
Park Release lever is locked in the released position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To reset the Manual Park Release:
1. Pull the tether upwards to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down to its original position.
3. Re-install the access cover and the rubber storage bin
liner.
Locked Position
6
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
FWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
ONLY METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent NOTE:
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipdisabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadverment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
tent Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical • Use approved receptacle location to free the disabled
failure when the electric parking brake (EPB) is envehicle from its environment.
gaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear
wheels off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery Points
that can be used to recover a disabled vehicle, located on
the underbody of the vehicle.
6
NOTE:
• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are properly
seated and secured in the attachment points.
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a trained
professional only.
Front Of Vehicle Recovery Points
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle over
the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the length
of the vehicle.
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
NOTE: The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver’s door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, you must manually
disable the Electric Park Brake each time the driver’s
door is opened, by pressing the brake pedal and then
pushing the EPB switch down.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
CAUTION!
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
wheels raised).
on the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
(Continued)
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
6
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
power transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .599 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .605
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .600
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .601
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .602
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .603
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
7
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
▫ Front Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
▫ Front Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Backup Lamps (Passenger Side) . . . . . . . . . . .662
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
▫ Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
▫ Backup Lamps (Driver Side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664
▫ Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . .665
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
▫ Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps . . . . .655
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
— Oil Fill Cap
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Battery
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Engine Oil Filter Access Cover
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Battery
— Engine Oil Fill
— Air Cleaner Filter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
WARNING!
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior “CHECK GASCAP” message will be displayed in the
tracking device, it may:
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including Information Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
safety related systems, could be impaired or a Information (EVIC) or ⬙Driver Information Display
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
in an accident involving serious injury or death. further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap until a
• Access, or allow others to access, information “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indication that the
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- fuel filler cap is properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard
sonal information.
Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. following:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
check.
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your DEALER SERVICE
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
(Continued)
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at high end of the range marking.
regular intervals, such as every month. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
CAUTION!
fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
your engine.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American Petrotion.
leum Institute (API). The manufacNOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interturer only recommends API Certified
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
engine oils.
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
7
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
MOPAR SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
and vehicle fuel economy.
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera- The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
and vehicle fuel economy.
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
ment” in this section.
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certiber should not be used.
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomstation or governmental agency for advice on how and
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
your area.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Sever Duty Conditions”
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommaintenance interval if applicable.
mended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service 1. Remove the passenger side console closeout cover, by
be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
inserting fingers between bottom of side panel (at
recycling equipment.
rear) and the carpet. Pull outboard to disengage the 3
clips.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in front of the evaporator on
the lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
7
Console Closeout Panel
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Carefully remove 3 push pins holding the hush panel
and remove the part.
Air Filter Cover Location
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position flow
Hush Panel
direction indicators.
4. Remove the filter door by pushing down the tab on the
top bottom of the door and lift the tab at the top of the
door to release the cover then rotate remove the door
out and lift up.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Install the passenger side hush panel under the dash
panel and console closeout.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
A/C Air Filter
Body Lubrication
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal. seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependyear, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesWindshield Wiper Blades
sary.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a Adding Washer Fluid
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulaThe fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine
tions of salt or road film.
compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and Exhaust System
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
residual water.
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some system.
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
7
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
WARNING!
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomengine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
(Continued)
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporprotection of your engine which contains aluminum
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Points To Remember
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
condenser clean.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti- • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
ing.
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) Brake Master Cylinder
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis- The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
sions.
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level
should be checked when pads are replaced. However,
low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental addiNOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
used.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable Washing
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veresistance built into your vehicle.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
What Causes Corrosion?
clear water.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumupaint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
The most common causes are:
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
• Stone and gravel impact.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Special Care
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
surface.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
directly on the mirror.
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
WARNING!
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses, circuit breakers and
relays. A label that identifies each component is printed
on the inside of the cover.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
F06
F07
F08
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Blade Fuse
–
–
25 Amp Clear
Description
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Control Module
(ECM)/Fuel Inj.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
Cavity
F09
F10
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
Blade Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
F11
F12
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
F13
–
10 Amp Red
F14
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Not Used
Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) – If Equipped
Not Used
Brake Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
Engine Control Module
(ECM)/VSM (Engine
Stop/Start Only)
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)/Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) – If
Equipped/RDM/Brake
System Module (BSM)/
Brake Pedal Switch/EPB
(Electric Park Brake)
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
Blade Fuse
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
5 Amp Tan
70 Amp Tan
F23
–
50 Amp Red
F24
–
–
Description
Not Used
Ignition Coil
Not Used
Not Used
Starter Solenoid
A/C Compressor Clutch
Not Used
Radiator Fan Enable
Body Controller Module
(BCM) – Feed 2
Voltage Stability Module
(VSM) #2 – If Equipped
With Engine Stop/Start
Option
Not Used
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
Cavity
F25B
Cartridge Fuse
–
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
F26
F27
F28
–
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
F29
F30
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
F31
F32
F33
F34
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Front Washer Pump – If
Equipped with Engine
Stop/Start Option
Not Used
Not Used
Transmission Control
Module (TCM)
Not Used
Engine Control Module
(ECM)/EPS/Fuel Pump
Relay Feed
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F35
F36
F37
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
50 Amp Red
Blade Fuse
–
–
–
F38
F39
F40
F41
–
40 Amp Green
–
50 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
F41
60 Amp Yellow
–
F42
F43
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Not Used
Not Used
Radiator Fan PWM Controller
Not Used
HVAC Blower Motor
Not Used
Voltage Stability Module
(VSM) #1 – If Equipped
With Engine Stop/Start
Option
Body Controller Module
(BCM) – Feed 1
Not Used
Fuel Pump Motor
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
Cavity
F44
F45
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
Blade Fuse
–
–
F46
F47
F48
25 Amp Clear
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
F49
30 Amp Pink
–
F50
30 Amp Pink
–
F51
F52
F53
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
Description
Not Used
Passenger Door Module
(PDM) – If Equipped
Sunroof – If Equipped
Not Used
Driver Door Module
(DDM)
Power Inverter (115V
A/C) – If Equipped
Windshield Wiper Smart
Motor (WWSM)
Not Used
Not Used
Brake System Module
BSM & Valves
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F54
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
Blade Fuse
–
F55
–
10 Amp Red
F56
–
15 Amp Blue
F57
F58
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
F59
30 Amp Pink
–
Description
Body Controller Module
(BCM) – Feed 3
Blind Spot Sensors/
Compass/Rearview Camera – If Equipped
Ignition Node Module
(IGNM)/RF Hub
Not Used
Occupant Classification
Module/Voltage Stability
Module (VSM) #2 – If
Equipped With Engine
Stop/Start Option
Drivetrain Control Module (DTCM)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Cavity
F60
Cartridge Fuse
–
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
F61
F62
F63
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
F64
–
20 Amp Yellow
F65
–
10 Amp Red
Description
Power Outlet – Center
Console
Not Used
Not Used
Front Heated Seats – If
Equipped
Heated Steering Wheel –
If Equipped
In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Driver Assist System
Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If
Equipped With Engine
Stop/Start Option
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F66
Cartridge Fuse
–
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
F67
–
10 Amp Red
F68
F69
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
F70
–
5 Amp Tan
Description
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)/Electronic Climate
Control (ECC)
In Vehicle Temperature
Sensor/Humidity Sensor/
Drivers Assist System
Module (DASM)/Park
Assist (PAM) – If
Equipped
Not Used
Gear Shift Module
(GSM)/Active Grill Shutter (AGS). – If Equipped/
EPB SW
Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) – If Equipped with
Engine Stop/Start Option
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Cavity
F71
Cartridge Fuse
–
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
F72
–
10 Amp Red
F73
F74
F75
F76
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
F77
–
10 Amp Red
F78
–
10 Amp Red
Description
HID Headlamp Right – If
Equipped with Engine
Stop/Start Option
Heated Mirrors – If
Equipped
Not Used
Rear Defroster/Defogger
Cigar Lighter
Drivers Window SW– If
Equipped
UCI Port/Brake Pedal
Switch
Diagnostic Port/Steering
Column Control Module
(SCCM)
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F79
Cartridge Fuse
–
Blade Fuse
10 Amp Red
F80
F81
F82
F83
–
–
–
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
F84
30 Amp Pink
–
F85
F86
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Integrated Center Stack
(ICS)/Switch Bank/
Instrument Panel Cluster
(IPC)/EPB SW
Radio
Not Used
Not Used
Engine Control Module
(ECM)
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
– Left
Not Used
Horns – If Equipped With
Engine Stop/Start Option
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Cavity
F87A
Cartridge Fuse
–
Blade Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
F88
–
10 Amp Red
F89
F90
F91
F92
F93
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–
Description
HID Headlamp Left – If
Equipped Engine Stop/
Start Option
Collision Mitigation Module (CMM)/
Electrochromatic Mirror/
Haptic Lane Feedback
Module (Half)/Humidity
Sensor– If Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Brake System Module
(BSM) – Pump Motor – If
Equipped
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F94
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
Blade Fuse
–
F95
–
10 Amp Red
F96
–
10 Amp Red
F97
–
10 Amp Red
F98
–
25 Amp Clear
F99
F100
–
–
–
–
Description
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
– Right
Electrochromatic Mirror/
Rain/Pass. Window SW/
Power Outlet Console
Illumination/Sensor/
Sunroof – If Equipped
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
Audio Amplifier – If
Equipped
Not Used
Not Used
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity
F13
F32
F36
F37
F38
F43
F48
F49
F51
Blade Fuse
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
10 Amp Red
Description
Low Beam Left
Interior Lighting
Intrusion Module / Siren
Aux. Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
All Doors Lock/Unlock
Washer Pump Front
Horns
Lumbar Support
Driver Window Switch / Power Mirrors – If
Equipped
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F53
F89
F91
F92
F93
Blade Fuse
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
Description
UCI Port (USB & AUX)
Trunk Lamp
Fog Lamp Front Left
Fog Lamp Front Right
Low Beam Right
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
You may:
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
VEHICLE STORAGE
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy/Reading Lamp
Center Courtesy/Reading Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamp
Glove Compartment Lamp
Shift Indicator Lamp
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement.
Bulb Number
578/W5W
578/W5W
A6220
A6220
IKLE14140
579
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp
Bi-Halogen Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamp
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Side Marker Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
LED Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Bulb Number
HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
9005HL+
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
PWY24W SV
W3W
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
H11
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
W21W
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
921
W5W
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmothe lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
WARNING!
accelerate the clearing process.
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
Low Beam And High Beam Headlamps
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge (HID)
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electroHeadlamps — If Equipped
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage discharge dealer for service.
light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even
with the headlamp switch off. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a HID headlamp light source
yourself. If an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
BULB REPLACEMENT
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Halogen Headlamps
1. Remove the top pushpin on the headlamp access door
in the wheel liner to access the headlamp assembly.
3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb cap and rotate it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
Access Door
2. Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the
headlamp bulb cap.
4. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket assembly and
rotate counterclockwise to remove from the housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
7
Headlamp Bulb Socket
Headlamp Bulb
5. Disconnect the bulb from the electrical connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in
place.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cap in the headlamp housing and rotate clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Lock headlamp access door in wheel liner.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the lamp assembly
on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Beauty Cover
3. Remove the brace by removing the four fasteners and
loosening the 5th inboard fastener.
2. Remove the beauty cover, by removing all push pins
and lifting beauty cover.
4. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket assembly
counterclockwise, and then remove the front turn
signal lamp assembly from the lamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
7. Install air cleaner filter housing, if removed.
8. Install brace, brace bolts and tighten as shown.
7
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
Brace Bolt Tightening Sequence
6. Install the front turn signal lamp socket assembly into 9. Install beauty cover.
the housing, and rotate the front turn signal lamp
socket clockwise to lock it in place.
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner wheel liner
and carefully peel back liner for access.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp socket
and replace with a new bulb.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
2. Firmly grasp the front side marker lamp socket and
rotate 1/4 turn counterclockwise to remove it from the
lamp assembly.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp assembly
and rotate 1/4 turn clockwise to lock into place.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and install the 2. Reach behind the fog lamp housing to access the bulb.
three fasteners.
3. Rotate the front fog lamp socket counterclockwise,
and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the
Front Fog Lamp
front fog lamp housing.
1. Remove the three fasteners from the lower closeout,
and peel down the lower closeout.
7
Front Fog Lamp Socket
Lower Closeout
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb.
Backup Lamps (Passenger Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
CAUTION!
2. Remove the passenger side access cover.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Remove the inner trunk lid handle cover.
4. Remove the two screws and remove the inner trunk
lid handle.
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
5. Install the front fog lamp socket assembly into the into trim push pins to gain access.
the front fog lamp housing, and rotate the connector
5. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
clockwise to lock it in place.
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
6. Position the lower closeout panel in place and secure
with the three fasteners.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
7
Inner Deck Panel
Backup Lamp Socket
6. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4 7. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
replacement bulb.
lid lamp housing.
8. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock NOTE: Passenger side is shown. The driver’s side is
similar.
it into place.
10. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
11. Install access cover.
Backup Lamps (Driver Side)
1. Open trunk lid.
2. Remove the drivers side access cover.
3. Remove inner deck lid support push pin.
NOTE: If necessary remove any additional inner deck lid
trim push pins to gain access.
4. Gently pull back the inner deck panel behind the trunk
lid lamp housing to expose the backup lamp socket.
Backup Lamp Socket
5. Rotate the backup lamp socket counter clockwise 1/4
turn to remove the backup lamp socket from the trunk
lid lamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
7. Install the backup lamp socket into the trunk lid lamp
housing.
8. Rotate backup lamp socket clockwise 1/4 turn to lock
it into place.
9. Reposition the inner deck panel and secure with a
push pin if removed.
10. Install the access cover.
Stop/Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the tail lamp housing beauty cover by grasping the top edge and pulling rearward to expose the
tail lamp housing bolts.
7
Tail Lamp Beauty Cover
3. Remove the tail lamp housing bolts
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Rotate the stop/rear turn signal lamp socket 1/4 turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
replacement bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the tail lamp housing and
rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in place.
8. Install the tail lamp housing.
9. Install the tail lamp housing beauty cover.
Tail Lamp Bolts
4. Pull the tail lamp housing directly rearward to dislodge the two out bored ball studs from the socket
fasteners.
License Plate Lamp
1. Remove the screw of the license plate lamp assembly
and pull down on the license plate lamp assembly to
remove.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket and install the
NOTE: It may be necessary to use significant force to
replacement bulb.
remove the two out bored ball studs from the socket
3. Install the license plate lamp assembly.
fasteners to remove the tail lamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4L and 3.6L Engines
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
3.6 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
15.8 Gallons
60 Liters
5.5 Quarts
6 Quarts
5.2 Liters
5.6 Liters
7.2 Quarts
6.8 Liters
8.7 Quarts
8.2 Liters
7
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
Component
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If
Equipped
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine – If
Equipped
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
7
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid,
SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
8
674 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change Reset”
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
in “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
⬙Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
concern for fleet customers.
cold ambient temperatures will influence when the “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operat- Severe Duty All Models
ing Conditions can cause the change oil message to
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator Duty.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 675
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
8
676 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Maintenance Chart
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mileage:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 677
Replace spark plugs **
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
X
8
678 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .681
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .682
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .682
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .683
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .686
9
680 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .687
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 681
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
682 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 247-9753
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 683
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Service Contract
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
684 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARNING!
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 685
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
9
686 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and and/or components is written in straightforward lanRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
roadsafety/
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 687
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
688 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving Temperature Grades
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
teristics and climate.
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
Traction Grades
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforpassenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
mance.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
WARNING!
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 689
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
INDEX
10
692 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .184
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 64
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 82
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 66
Front Passenger Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 110, 326
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .610
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404, 409
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404, 409
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 613
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .424, 426
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . .404, 409, 422, 612
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
INDEX 693
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 667
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .422
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 629
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629, 671
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 628
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627, 671
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331, 610
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
10
694 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599, 600, 608
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 538
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .603
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483, 626
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626, 671
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653, 655, 660
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 653, 660
INDEX 695
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 104
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .100
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .99
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .93
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .89
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .623
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620, 624
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .621, 667, 668
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .184, 375
10
696 INDEX
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 352, 353 Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681 Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .35
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 31
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 35
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 407 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601 Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Driver Information Display (DID)
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Dipsticks
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Driver Information Display (DID) . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Disposal
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .624
INDEX 697
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .179, 184
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .333
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .273
Change Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .355
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
EVIC Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .603
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599, 600
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
10
698 INDEX
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 538
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606, 667, 668
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599, 600, 608
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607, 667
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 539
Event Data Recorder .
Exhaust Gas Caution
Exhaust System . . . .
Exterior Lighting . . .
Exterior Lights . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . .85
.109, 538
.109, 617
.161, 660
.112, 660
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 613
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609, 668
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 166, 350, 658
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539, 540
INDEX 699
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .668
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 661
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Front Position Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 539
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 668
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .279, 287
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
10
700 INDEX
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404, 409
Hazard
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .167
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .635 Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .167 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Front Courtesy Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . .22
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter . . . . . . .22
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 656
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
INDEX 701
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . .319, 322, 330, 335, 346, 350
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 26
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357, 370
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 26
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 23
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 37
Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 37
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569, 572
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 37
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . .23, 37
Key Fob
Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
10
702 INDEX
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 653, 660
Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653, 660
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 161, 653
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 110, 326
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 660
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351, 352, 353
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 167
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 660
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 661
Front Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 656
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666
INDEX 703
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .337
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .171
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167, 277
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658, 660
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .341, 524
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 166, 350, 658
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .330, 350
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .337, 603
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
10
704 INDEX
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606, 668
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .667
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609, 668
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607, 667
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604, 685
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608, 667
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 668 Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
INDEX 705
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . .298, 301
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 293
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 686
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 232 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .505 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .623
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 19, 27, 31, 42
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
10
706 INDEX
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 232
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .19, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .19, 26
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 23
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .401
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
EVIC Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
INDEX 707
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .56
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .59
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 110
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .56
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 51, 54
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
10
708 INDEX
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 143, 148
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 143, 145
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
SENTRY KEY
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 166, 350, 658
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515, 516, 517, 570
INDEX 709
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 183
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 184
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 455
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .401
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 652
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 293
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .62
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.177
.422
.177
.162
10
710 INDEX
Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .504, 505
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 509, 515, 516, 687
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509, 515, 516
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569, 572
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504, 506
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . .361, 374, 524
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497, 509
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515, 516, 517, 570
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Tire Service Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558, 561
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .549
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472, 473
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
INDEX 711
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461, 627
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .26
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . .279
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 47
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 350, 658
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 35
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506, 546
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Uconnect
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 652
10
712 INDEX
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 616
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 292, 297
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Driver/Passenger Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . .42
Express Up And Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Rear Passenger Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Window Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 616
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2016 200
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2016
16UF-126-AD
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
ThirdFourth
EditionEdition
Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
200
Download PDF
Similar pages